Upload
techne-phobos
View
43
Download
2
Tags:
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
ENC6800+ Composite Encoder and ENS6800+ Composite Encoder Synchronizer
Installation and Operation Manual
Edition D175-000147-00
Edition DDecember 2005
ENC6800+ Composite Encoder
ENS6800+ Composite Encoder Synchronizer
Installation and Operation Manual
Trademarks and CopyrightsCCS CCS CoPilot CCS Navigator CCS Pilot Command Control System CineTone CinePhase CineSound DigiBus DigiPeek Digital Glue DigiWorks DTV Glue EventWORKS EZ HD Genesis HDTV Glue Image Q Icon IconLogo IconMaster IconMaster Nav IconSet Icon Station Inca Inca Station InfoCaster Inscriber Inscriber CGmdashFX Integrator LeFont Leitch LogoMotion MediaFile MIX BOX NEO the NEO design NEOSCOPE NewsFlash Nexio Opus Panacea PanelMAPPER Platinum Portal PROM-Slide RouterMAPPER RouterWORKS Signal Quality Manager SpyderWeb SuiteView TitleMotion UNIFRAME Velocity VelocityHD VideoCarte Videotek and X75 are trademarks of the Harris Corporation which may be registered in the United States Canada andor other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective ownersCopyright 2006 Harris Corporation All rights reserved This publication supersedes all previous releases Printed in Canada
Warranty InformationThe Limited Warranty Policy provides a complete description of your warranty coverage limitations and exclusions as well as procedures for obtaining warranty service To view the complete warranty visit wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch
Contents
PrefaceManual Information vii
Purpose viiAudience viiRevision History viiWriting Conventions viiiObtaining Documents viii
UnpackingShipping Information ixUnpacking a Product ixProduct Servicing ixReturning a Product ix
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance xWaste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance xiSafety xii
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual xii
Chapter 1 IntroductionOverview 1Product Description 2Module Descriptions 4
Front Module 4Back Connector 6
Signal Flow 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual iii
Contents
Chapter 2 InstallationOverview 9Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings 10Unpacking the Module 11
Preparing the Product for Installation 11Checking the Packing List 11
Setting Jumpers 12Jumper J3 for Local or Remote Control 12Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock Source 13Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY Output 14
Installing 6800+ Modules 15Making Connections 15Removing 6800+ Modules 15
Chapter 3 OperationOverview 17Operating Notes 18
Cross-Functional Parameter Changes 19Changing Parameter Settings 20
Recalling Default Parameter Settings 21Reading Software and Hardware Versions 21
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control Parameters 22LEDs and Alarms 30
Monitoring LEDs 30Module Status LEDs 32Alarms 33
Chapter 4 SpecificationsOverview 35Video Input 36
Serial Digital Video 36Reference Input 36
Video Output 37Composite Analog 37Serial Digital Video 38Data IO Output 38
Power Consumption 38Operating Temperature 39
iv ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Appendix A FiltersComposite Encoder Filter 41
NTSCPAL-M Pass Filter 41PAL-B Pass Filter 42
Cross-Color Reduction Filter 43Filter Summary 43Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response 44Horizontal High Pass Filters 44
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ TroubleshootingOverview 47Genlock Issues 48Output Issues 51
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Overview 53General Troubleshooting Steps 54Software Communication and Control Issues 55
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modules 55+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Frame 56+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding 57+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window 57+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo 57CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module 58Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots 58
Hardware Communication and Control Issues 59Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure 59Module Does Not Seem to Work 59
Contacting Customer Service 59
IndexKeywords 61
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual v
Contents
vi ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
PurposeThis manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
AudienceThis manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance andor operation of the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
Revision HistoryTable P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A May 2003 Initial Release
B February 2004 Updated information includingbull Parameter optionsbull Jumper informationbull Alarm information
C August 2005 Minor corrections to content addition of communications troubleshooting information
D December 2005 Additional module-specific troubleshooting information
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual vii
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Edition DDecember 2005
ENC6800+ Composite Encoder
ENS6800+ Composite Encoder Synchronizer
Installation and Operation Manual
Trademarks and CopyrightsCCS CCS CoPilot CCS Navigator CCS Pilot Command Control System CineTone CinePhase CineSound DigiBus DigiPeek Digital Glue DigiWorks DTV Glue EventWORKS EZ HD Genesis HDTV Glue Image Q Icon IconLogo IconMaster IconMaster Nav IconSet Icon Station Inca Inca Station InfoCaster Inscriber Inscriber CGmdashFX Integrator LeFont Leitch LogoMotion MediaFile MIX BOX NEO the NEO design NEOSCOPE NewsFlash Nexio Opus Panacea PanelMAPPER Platinum Portal PROM-Slide RouterMAPPER RouterWORKS Signal Quality Manager SpyderWeb SuiteView TitleMotion UNIFRAME Velocity VelocityHD VideoCarte Videotek and X75 are trademarks of the Harris Corporation which may be registered in the United States Canada andor other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective ownersCopyright 2006 Harris Corporation All rights reserved This publication supersedes all previous releases Printed in Canada
Warranty InformationThe Limited Warranty Policy provides a complete description of your warranty coverage limitations and exclusions as well as procedures for obtaining warranty service To view the complete warranty visit wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch
Contents
PrefaceManual Information vii
Purpose viiAudience viiRevision History viiWriting Conventions viiiObtaining Documents viii
UnpackingShipping Information ixUnpacking a Product ixProduct Servicing ixReturning a Product ix
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance xWaste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance xiSafety xii
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual xii
Chapter 1 IntroductionOverview 1Product Description 2Module Descriptions 4
Front Module 4Back Connector 6
Signal Flow 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual iii
Contents
Chapter 2 InstallationOverview 9Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings 10Unpacking the Module 11
Preparing the Product for Installation 11Checking the Packing List 11
Setting Jumpers 12Jumper J3 for Local or Remote Control 12Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock Source 13Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY Output 14
Installing 6800+ Modules 15Making Connections 15Removing 6800+ Modules 15
Chapter 3 OperationOverview 17Operating Notes 18
Cross-Functional Parameter Changes 19Changing Parameter Settings 20
Recalling Default Parameter Settings 21Reading Software and Hardware Versions 21
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control Parameters 22LEDs and Alarms 30
Monitoring LEDs 30Module Status LEDs 32Alarms 33
Chapter 4 SpecificationsOverview 35Video Input 36
Serial Digital Video 36Reference Input 36
Video Output 37Composite Analog 37Serial Digital Video 38Data IO Output 38
Power Consumption 38Operating Temperature 39
iv ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Appendix A FiltersComposite Encoder Filter 41
NTSCPAL-M Pass Filter 41PAL-B Pass Filter 42
Cross-Color Reduction Filter 43Filter Summary 43Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response 44Horizontal High Pass Filters 44
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ TroubleshootingOverview 47Genlock Issues 48Output Issues 51
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Overview 53General Troubleshooting Steps 54Software Communication and Control Issues 55
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modules 55+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Frame 56+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding 57+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window 57+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo 57CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module 58Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots 58
Hardware Communication and Control Issues 59Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure 59Module Does Not Seem to Work 59
Contacting Customer Service 59
IndexKeywords 61
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual v
Contents
vi ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
PurposeThis manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
AudienceThis manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance andor operation of the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
Revision HistoryTable P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A May 2003 Initial Release
B February 2004 Updated information includingbull Parameter optionsbull Jumper informationbull Alarm information
C August 2005 Minor corrections to content addition of communications troubleshooting information
D December 2005 Additional module-specific troubleshooting information
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual vii
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Trademarks and CopyrightsCCS CCS CoPilot CCS Navigator CCS Pilot Command Control System CineTone CinePhase CineSound DigiBus DigiPeek Digital Glue DigiWorks DTV Glue EventWORKS EZ HD Genesis HDTV Glue Image Q Icon IconLogo IconMaster IconMaster Nav IconSet Icon Station Inca Inca Station InfoCaster Inscriber Inscriber CGmdashFX Integrator LeFont Leitch LogoMotion MediaFile MIX BOX NEO the NEO design NEOSCOPE NewsFlash Nexio Opus Panacea PanelMAPPER Platinum Portal PROM-Slide RouterMAPPER RouterWORKS Signal Quality Manager SpyderWeb SuiteView TitleMotion UNIFRAME Velocity VelocityHD VideoCarte Videotek and X75 are trademarks of the Harris Corporation which may be registered in the United States Canada andor other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective ownersCopyright 2006 Harris Corporation All rights reserved This publication supersedes all previous releases Printed in Canada
Warranty InformationThe Limited Warranty Policy provides a complete description of your warranty coverage limitations and exclusions as well as procedures for obtaining warranty service To view the complete warranty visit wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch
Contents
PrefaceManual Information vii
Purpose viiAudience viiRevision History viiWriting Conventions viiiObtaining Documents viii
UnpackingShipping Information ixUnpacking a Product ixProduct Servicing ixReturning a Product ix
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance xWaste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance xiSafety xii
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual xii
Chapter 1 IntroductionOverview 1Product Description 2Module Descriptions 4
Front Module 4Back Connector 6
Signal Flow 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual iii
Contents
Chapter 2 InstallationOverview 9Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings 10Unpacking the Module 11
Preparing the Product for Installation 11Checking the Packing List 11
Setting Jumpers 12Jumper J3 for Local or Remote Control 12Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock Source 13Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY Output 14
Installing 6800+ Modules 15Making Connections 15Removing 6800+ Modules 15
Chapter 3 OperationOverview 17Operating Notes 18
Cross-Functional Parameter Changes 19Changing Parameter Settings 20
Recalling Default Parameter Settings 21Reading Software and Hardware Versions 21
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control Parameters 22LEDs and Alarms 30
Monitoring LEDs 30Module Status LEDs 32Alarms 33
Chapter 4 SpecificationsOverview 35Video Input 36
Serial Digital Video 36Reference Input 36
Video Output 37Composite Analog 37Serial Digital Video 38Data IO Output 38
Power Consumption 38Operating Temperature 39
iv ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Appendix A FiltersComposite Encoder Filter 41
NTSCPAL-M Pass Filter 41PAL-B Pass Filter 42
Cross-Color Reduction Filter 43Filter Summary 43Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response 44Horizontal High Pass Filters 44
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ TroubleshootingOverview 47Genlock Issues 48Output Issues 51
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Overview 53General Troubleshooting Steps 54Software Communication and Control Issues 55
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modules 55+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Frame 56+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding 57+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window 57+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo 57CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module 58Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots 58
Hardware Communication and Control Issues 59Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure 59Module Does Not Seem to Work 59
Contacting Customer Service 59
IndexKeywords 61
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual v
Contents
vi ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
PurposeThis manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
AudienceThis manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance andor operation of the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
Revision HistoryTable P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A May 2003 Initial Release
B February 2004 Updated information includingbull Parameter optionsbull Jumper informationbull Alarm information
C August 2005 Minor corrections to content addition of communications troubleshooting information
D December 2005 Additional module-specific troubleshooting information
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual vii
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Contents
PrefaceManual Information vii
Purpose viiAudience viiRevision History viiWriting Conventions viiiObtaining Documents viii
UnpackingShipping Information ixUnpacking a Product ixProduct Servicing ixReturning a Product ix
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance xWaste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance xiSafety xii
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual xii
Chapter 1 IntroductionOverview 1Product Description 2Module Descriptions 4
Front Module 4Back Connector 6
Signal Flow 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual iii
Contents
Chapter 2 InstallationOverview 9Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings 10Unpacking the Module 11
Preparing the Product for Installation 11Checking the Packing List 11
Setting Jumpers 12Jumper J3 for Local or Remote Control 12Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock Source 13Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY Output 14
Installing 6800+ Modules 15Making Connections 15Removing 6800+ Modules 15
Chapter 3 OperationOverview 17Operating Notes 18
Cross-Functional Parameter Changes 19Changing Parameter Settings 20
Recalling Default Parameter Settings 21Reading Software and Hardware Versions 21
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control Parameters 22LEDs and Alarms 30
Monitoring LEDs 30Module Status LEDs 32Alarms 33
Chapter 4 SpecificationsOverview 35Video Input 36
Serial Digital Video 36Reference Input 36
Video Output 37Composite Analog 37Serial Digital Video 38Data IO Output 38
Power Consumption 38Operating Temperature 39
iv ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Appendix A FiltersComposite Encoder Filter 41
NTSCPAL-M Pass Filter 41PAL-B Pass Filter 42
Cross-Color Reduction Filter 43Filter Summary 43Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response 44Horizontal High Pass Filters 44
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ TroubleshootingOverview 47Genlock Issues 48Output Issues 51
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Overview 53General Troubleshooting Steps 54Software Communication and Control Issues 55
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modules 55+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Frame 56+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding 57+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window 57+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo 57CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module 58Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots 58
Hardware Communication and Control Issues 59Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure 59Module Does Not Seem to Work 59
Contacting Customer Service 59
IndexKeywords 61
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual v
Contents
vi ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
PurposeThis manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
AudienceThis manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance andor operation of the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
Revision HistoryTable P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A May 2003 Initial Release
B February 2004 Updated information includingbull Parameter optionsbull Jumper informationbull Alarm information
C August 2005 Minor corrections to content addition of communications troubleshooting information
D December 2005 Additional module-specific troubleshooting information
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual vii
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Contents
Chapter 2 InstallationOverview 9Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings 10Unpacking the Module 11
Preparing the Product for Installation 11Checking the Packing List 11
Setting Jumpers 12Jumper J3 for Local or Remote Control 12Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock Source 13Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY Output 14
Installing 6800+ Modules 15Making Connections 15Removing 6800+ Modules 15
Chapter 3 OperationOverview 17Operating Notes 18
Cross-Functional Parameter Changes 19Changing Parameter Settings 20
Recalling Default Parameter Settings 21Reading Software and Hardware Versions 21
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control Parameters 22LEDs and Alarms 30
Monitoring LEDs 30Module Status LEDs 32Alarms 33
Chapter 4 SpecificationsOverview 35Video Input 36
Serial Digital Video 36Reference Input 36
Video Output 37Composite Analog 37Serial Digital Video 38Data IO Output 38
Power Consumption 38Operating Temperature 39
iv ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Contents
Appendix A FiltersComposite Encoder Filter 41
NTSCPAL-M Pass Filter 41PAL-B Pass Filter 42
Cross-Color Reduction Filter 43Filter Summary 43Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response 44Horizontal High Pass Filters 44
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ TroubleshootingOverview 47Genlock Issues 48Output Issues 51
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Overview 53General Troubleshooting Steps 54Software Communication and Control Issues 55
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modules 55+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Frame 56+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding 57+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window 57+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo 57CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module 58Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots 58
Hardware Communication and Control Issues 59Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure 59Module Does Not Seem to Work 59
Contacting Customer Service 59
IndexKeywords 61
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual v
Contents
vi ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
PurposeThis manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
AudienceThis manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance andor operation of the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
Revision HistoryTable P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A May 2003 Initial Release
B February 2004 Updated information includingbull Parameter optionsbull Jumper informationbull Alarm information
C August 2005 Minor corrections to content addition of communications troubleshooting information
D December 2005 Additional module-specific troubleshooting information
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual vii
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Contents
Appendix A FiltersComposite Encoder Filter 41
NTSCPAL-M Pass Filter 41PAL-B Pass Filter 42
Cross-Color Reduction Filter 43Filter Summary 43Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response 44Horizontal High Pass Filters 44
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ TroubleshootingOverview 47Genlock Issues 48Output Issues 51
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Overview 53General Troubleshooting Steps 54Software Communication and Control Issues 55
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modules 55+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Frame 56+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding 57+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window 57+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo 57CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module 58Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots 58
Hardware Communication and Control Issues 59Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure 59Module Does Not Seem to Work 59
Contacting Customer Service 59
IndexKeywords 61
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual v
Contents
vi ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
PurposeThis manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
AudienceThis manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance andor operation of the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
Revision HistoryTable P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A May 2003 Initial Release
B February 2004 Updated information includingbull Parameter optionsbull Jumper informationbull Alarm information
C August 2005 Minor corrections to content addition of communications troubleshooting information
D December 2005 Additional module-specific troubleshooting information
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual vii
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Contents
vi ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
PurposeThis manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
AudienceThis manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance andor operation of the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
Revision HistoryTable P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A May 2003 Initial Release
B February 2004 Updated information includingbull Parameter optionsbull Jumper informationbull Alarm information
C August 2005 Minor corrections to content addition of communications troubleshooting information
D December 2005 Additional module-specific troubleshooting information
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual vii
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Preface
Manual Information
PurposeThis manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
AudienceThis manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance andor operation of the ENCENS6800+ Composite Video Encoder Modules
Revision HistoryTable P-1 Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A May 2003 Initial Release
B February 2004 Updated information includingbull Parameter optionsbull Jumper informationbull Alarm information
C August 2005 Minor corrections to content addition of communications troubleshooting information
D December 2005 Additional module-specific troubleshooting information
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual vii
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Preface
Writing ConventionsTo enhance your understanding the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions
Obtaining DocumentsProduct support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (go to Support gt Documentation) Alternatively contact your customer service representative to request a document
Table P-2 Writing Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes property sheets fields buttons check boxes list boxes combo boxes menus submenus windows lists and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses the names of books or publications and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field
gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
NoteIndicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
viii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Preface
UnpackingShipping InformationUnpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred
during transit 2 Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list 3 Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing4 Contact the carrier if any item is damaged5 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unitKeep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing
Product ServicingExcept for firmware upgrades ENCENS6800+ modules are not designed for field servicing All hardware upgrades modifications or repairs require you to return the modules to the Customer Service center
Returning a ProductIn the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number then send the unit back for servicing Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteriabull The packaging must be able to withstand the productrsquos weightbull The product must be held rigid within the packagingbull There must be at least 2 in (5 cm) of space between the product and
the containerbull The corners of the product must be protected
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual ix
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance
Directive 200295ECmdashcommonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)mdashsets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling The Directive takes effect on July 1 2006 and it refers to the following hazardous substances bull Lead (Pb)bull Mercury (Hg)bull Cadmium (Cd)bull Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)bull Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)bull Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)According to this EU Directive all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and ldquolead-freerdquo (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1 2006 are exempt from the legislation Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-1
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
x ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Preface
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 200296EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products Effective August 13 2005 producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods (Some EU member states may have different deadlines)In accordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled (See our Web site wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for more information on dates and deadlines for compliance) Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem as shown in Figure P-2
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual xi
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Preface
SafetyCarefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it If this product is rack-mountable it should be mounted in an appropriate rack using the rack-mounting positions and rear support guides provided It is recommended that each frame be connected to a separate electrical circuit for protection against circuit overloading If this product relies on forced air cooling it is recommended that all obstructions to the air flow be removed prior to mounting the frame in the rack If this product has a provision for external earth grounding it is recommended that the frame be grounded to earth via the protective earth ground on the rear panelIMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures
Safety Terms and Symbols in this ManualWARNINGStatements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present
CAUTIONStatements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property
xii ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 1
Introduction
OverviewThe ENCENS6800+ SDI-to-NTSCPAL-B encoders are compact modules for NTSC PAL-B and PAL-M encoding Supporting 422 serial digital inputs they may be used as either quality broadcast encoders or as monitoring encoders The ENS6800+ also allows frame synchronization and cross-color reduction The following topics are described in this chapterbull ldquoProduct Descriptionrdquo on page 2 bull ldquoModule Descriptionsrdquo on page 4bull ldquoSignal Flowrdquo on page 8
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 1 Introduction
Product DescriptionThe ENCENS6800+ encoders and synchronizers are part of the 6800+ Series of processing and conversion modules that have the following features
ENC6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputs and two SDI reclocked outputsbull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards
with settings shadowed and restored bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Color-frame locking if used with external genlock bull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustments for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENS6800+bull Encoding of 422 digital video into a composite analog signalbull 12-bit digital internal processing output over-sampled at 54 MHz bull Four composite outputsbull Two SDI reclocked outputs one dedicated one jumper-selectable
(for audio tracking signal with compatible audio synchronizers)bull Frame sync or delay modesbull Bypassable cross-color reduction with one-line delay
2 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 1 Introduction
bull Automatic selection between NTSC PAL-M and PAL-B standards with settings shadowed and restored
bull Genlock input on module or frame genlock to be used for referencebull Selection between black pass or freeze when input signal is lostbull Jitter removalbull EDH detectionbull Vertical blanking fieldlinemode control lines 10 to 21
(NTSCPAL-M) lines 6 to 23 (PAL-B)bull Adjustable level controls for luminance chrominance and blackbull Adjustment for plusmn180 degrees chrominance phasebull SCH offset (0180 for NTSC 090180270 for PAL)bull Adjustment for plusmn45 degrees fine phase bull Various test signals color bars modulated ramp multiburst
pulsebarsbull Pedestal onoff selection (with starting line selection)
bull Full control support via +Pilot LiteTM (included) or optional CCS PilotTM and CCS NavigatorTM (requires ICE6800+)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 1 Introduction
Module Descriptions
Front ModuleFigure 1-1 is a generic top-front view of a typical 6800+ module and shows the general location of standard LEDs controls and jumpers
Figure 1-1 Typical 6800+ Module
Table 1-1 on page 5 briefly describes generic 6800+ LEDs switches and jumpers See ldquoChapter 3 Operationrdquo for more information on specific ENCENS6800+ module controls LEDs and jumpers
Module status LEDs
Mode select rotary switch
Navigation toggle switch
Monitoring LEDs
Remotelocal control jumper
Extractor handle
Control LEDs
NoteBefore connecting the ENC6800+ connector to primary power check and if necessary set the input voltage selector switch on the rear panel to match the local line voltage
4 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1 Generic 6800+ Module Features
Feature DescriptionModule status LEDs
Various color and lighting combinations of these LEDs indicate the module state See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for more information
Mode select rotary switch
This switch selects between various control parameters
Navigation toggle switch
This switch navigates up and down through the available control parametersbull Up Decrease
bull Down Increase
Control LEDs Various lighting combinations of these control LEDs (sometimes referred to as ldquoBank Select LEDsrdquo) indicate the currently selected bank See Table 3-1 ldquoSelected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDsrdquo for more information
Monitoring LEDs
Each 6800+ module has a number of LEDs assigned to indicate varying statesfunctions See ldquoMonitoring LEDsrdquo in Chapter 3 for a description of these LEDs
LocalRemote control jumper
bull Local Locks out external control panels and allows card-edge control only limits the functionality of remote software applications to monitoring
bull Remote Allows remote or local (card-edge) configuration operation and monitoring of theENCENS6800+
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 1 Introduction
Back ConnectorENCENS6800+ Back Connector for FR6802+ Frame
Figure 1-2 shows the double-slot back connector used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in an FR6802+ frame
Figure 1-2 ENCENS6800+ Back Connector
SDI IN
525 625
GENLOCK
1 2
RECLKSDI
3
4
1
2
CMPST
The RECLK SDI 1 can also serve as a DATA IO output The function assignment is jumper selectable
Genlock 1 Genlock 2
6 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 1 Introduction
68007000 Series Frame Back Connector (Overlay)Figure 1-3 shows the double-slot back connector overlay used by the ENCENS6800+ when installed in a 68007000 series frame
Figure 1-3 Back Connector Overlay for the 6800 Series Frame
SDI RLCK
COMPST VIDEO(PAL- BPAL-MNTSC)
SDI IN
Genlock 625 (Genlock 2)
Genlock 525(Genlock 1)
SDI RCLK or IO_DELAY
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 1 Introduction
Signal FlowFigure 1-4 shows the signal flow for the ENC6800+ module and Figure 1-5 shows the signal flow for the ENS6800+ module
Figure 1-4 ENC6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 1-5 ENS6800+ Signal Flow Diagram
NTSC referenceinput
Equalizer anddeserializer
Compositeencoder DAC
Genlock
SDI input
SDIoutputs
Compositeoutputs
Front-edgeuser interface
CCS controlmonitor portPAL reference
input
Frame reference
Equalizerand
deserializer
Compositeencoder
DAC LPF
Compositevideo outputs
SDI reclockedoutput 1SDI reclockedoutput 2
SDI videoInput
GenlockReference
videoinput
Card-edgecontrol
CCS control monitor port
8 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 2
Installation
OverviewThis chapter describes the ENCENS6800+ installation process including the following topicsbull ldquoMaximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratingsrdquo on page 10bull ldquoUnpacking the Modulerdquo on page 11bull ldquoSetting Jumpersrdquo on page 12bull ldquoInstalling 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15bull ldquoMaking Connectionsrdquo on page 15bull ldquoRemoving 6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 15
See the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating an FR6802+ frame and its components See the 68007000 Series Frames and Power Supply Installation and Operation Manual for information about installing and operating a 68007000 series frame
CautionBefore installing this product read the 6800+ Series Safety Instructions and Standards Manual shipped with every FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual or downloadable from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch This safety manual contains important information about the safe installation and operation of 6800+ series products
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 9
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 2 Installation
Maximum 6800+ Frame Power RatingsThe power consumption for the ENC6800+ module is 67 W and for the ENS6800+ is 75 W Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 describe the maximum allowable power ratings for 6800+ frames Note the given maximums before installing any 6800+ modules in your frame
Table 2-1 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using an AC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM(frame without fans)
50 W 10 5 W
FR6802+DMF(frame with fans)
120 W 10 12 W
FR6802+X(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF(frame with fans)
120 W 20 6 W
Table 2-2 Maximum Power Ratings for 6800+ Frames When Using a DC Power Supply
6800+ Frame Type
Max Frame Power Dissipation
Number of Usable Slots
Max Power Dissipation Per Slot
FR6802+DM48(frame without fans)
50 W 10 50 W
FR6802+DMF48(frame with fans)
105 W 10 105 W
FR6802+X48(frame without fans)
50 W 20 25 W
FR6802+XF48(frame with fans)
105 W 20 525 W
10 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking the Module
Preparing the Product for InstallationBefore you install the ENCENS6800+ perform the followingbull Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have
occurred during transitbull Confirm receipt of all items on the packing list See ldquoChecking the
Packing Listrdquo for more informationbull Remove the anti-static shipping pouch if present and all other
packaging materialbull Retain the original packaging materials for possible re-use
See ldquoUnpackingShipping Informationrdquo on page v for information about returning a product for servicing
Checking the Packing List
NoteContact your customer service representative if parts are missing or damaged
Table 2-3 Available Product Packages
Ordered Product Content DescriptionENCENS6800+ bull One ENCENS6800+ front module
bull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+D bull One ENCENS6800+ front modulebull One standard double-slot 10 BNC back
connectorbull One ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual
ENCENS6800+DR One standard double-slot 10 BNC back connector
153-00092-00 (Optional item)
ENCENS6800+ back connector overlay (for use in 68007000 series frames)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 11
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 2 Installation
Setting Jumpers The ENCENS6800+ module has three jumpers that you need to setbull J3 (See ldquoJumper J3 for Local or Remote Controlrdquo on page 12)bull J1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13)bull P1 (See ldquoSetting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY
Outputrdquo on page 14)
Figure 2-1 Location of the J3 J1 and P1Jumpers
Jumper J3 for Local or Remote ControlFollow this procedure to set the J3 jumper for either local or remote control1 Locate jumper J3 on the module (beside the extractor handle)
Figure 2-1 shows the standard location of the J3 jumper
NoteYou need to configure modules for local or remote operation prior to power-up To change the configuration first remove power from the module reset the jumper and then reapply power
The white triangle near the jumper pins on the module indicates pin 1
12 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 to set the module for Remote control or pins 2 and 3 to set the module for Local control See Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2 Jumper J3 Settings for Local and Remote Control
Setting Jumper J1 for Genlock SourceFollow this procedure to select the Genlock source by setting the J1 jumper to either Local or Frame mode1 Locate jumper J1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 if the genlock source is from the
local back connector (ldquoLrdquo) or pins 2 and 3 if the genlock source is from the frame (ldquoFrdquo) The frame genlock is available only with the FR6802+ frame
Figure 2-3 Jumper J1 Settings for Local or Frame Mode
The genlock source is not only selected by the J1 jumper setting described above but by the Reference Input Select parameter setting you make in Bank 0 rotary switch setting D (see Table 3-3 ldquoCard-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modulesrdquo on page 22) Parameter setting options include the followingbull Genlock 1 (labeled 525 on the rear module) Frame Genlock If
this setting is chosen then the genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input of the rear module (labeled 525) or from
Remote control setting Local control setting
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 31 2 3
Local mode Frame mode
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 13
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 2 Installation
the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module as shown in Figure 2-3
bull Genlock 2 (labeled 625 on the rear module) If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input of the rear module and is independent of the jumper J1 setting
bull Auto Varies between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock This is used if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case one reference input would be applied to the Genlock 2 input and the other reference input would be applied to either Genlock 1 or Frame Then when the input signal changes between SD 525 and SD 625 the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock source Remember that jumper J1 determines whether Genlock 1 or Frame is the source of the first genlock input (see Figure 2-3)
When the genlock source input is valid the Genlock LED will turn green If you are using an ENS6800+ and the Genlock LED never turns green ensure that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is not set to Delay
Setting Jumper P1 for Reclocking and IO_DELAY OutputFollow this procedure to set the P1 jumper to select Reclocked SDI or IO_DELAY output to a BNC output connector on the back module1 Locate jumper P1 on the module See Figure 2-1 on page 122 Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to set the module for SDI RCLK or
place a jumper on pins 1 and 2 and another jumper on pins 3 and 4 to set the module to output IO_DELAY
Figure 2-4 Jumper P1 Settings for Reclocked SDI or IO_Delay Output
Note Even though the rear module is labeled 525 for Genlock 1 and 625 for Genlock 2 either type of standard can be applied to either of the inputs They are not 525 or 625 dependent However the same type of genlock format (NTSC or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteThe ENC6800+ does not have IO_DELAY
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Reclocked SDI output IO_Delay output
14 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 2 Installation
Installing 6800+ ModulesThere are two types of modulesbull Double-slot back connectorsbull Front modulesBack connectors for this module come in the double-slot size Up to ten front modules can fit in an FR6802+ frame if they are connected to double-slot back connectors (two spaces are required to accommodate the extra width of the back connector)You can install most 6800+ modules in any unused slot without interfering with other frame functions
Making ConnectionsOnce you have installed the ENCENS6800+ module you can connect it to the appropriate input and outputs See Figure 1-2 on page 6 and Figure 1-3 on page 7
Removing 6800+ ModulesTo remove a module from an FR6802+ or 68007000 series frame follow these steps1 Pull out the finger-release screws on the right and left side of the
front panel and then open it2 Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module and then pull
the module out of its slot using the handle as a lever3 Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation4 Remove the back connector from an FR6800+ frame in this way
a Unscrew the top of the corresponding back connector and tip it towards you
CautionBefore installing your modules see the Maximum 6800+ Frame Power Ratings chart at the beginning of this chapter
NoteModules are hot-swappable and can be removed or replaced without powering down the frame
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 15
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 2 Installation
b Pull the bottom lip of the back connector from its slotc Reinstall a new or blank back connector in the empty slot to
ensure proper frame ventilation5 Remove the back connector overlay from the back panel of a
68007000 series frame Replace with a new back connector overlay if required
CautionTo prevent overheating during general frame operation and maintain proper airflow keep the front panel closed and all back connector slots covered during operation
16 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3
Operation
OverviewThis chapter describes how to operate the ENCENS6800+ using card-edge controls only See the following documents for information on how to operate this product remotelybull +Pilot Lite User Manual for serial interfacebull CCS Pilot CoPilot Navigator or RCP-CCS-1U Remote Control
Panel manual for Ethernet interface
The following topics are discussed in this chapterbull ldquoOperating Notesrdquo on page 18bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30bull ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20bull ldquoSetting ENCENS6800+ Control Parametersrdquo on page 22bull ldquoLEDs and Alarmsrdquo on page 30
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 17
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
Operating NotesWhen setting the control parameters on the ENCENS6800+ observe the followingbull If you make changes to certain parameters other related parameters
may also be affected See ldquoCross-Functional Parameter Changesrdquo on page 19 for more information
bull When you change a parameter the effect is immediate However the module requires up to 20 seconds to save the latest change After 20 seconds the new settings are saved and will be restored if the module loses power and must be restarted
18 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
Cross-Functional Parameter ChangesWhen you configure certain parameters you force a change in other associated parameters The following table lists the secondary changes that occur when you make these parameter selections
Table 3-1 Cross-Functional Parameter Changes
Parameter Option Affected Parameter ChangeSDI Video Standard 525 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63518 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-524 Ln
Black Level Enabled
Setup Enabled
Setup Starting Line Enabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Disabled
625 H Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-63963 micros
V Phase (ENS6800+ only) Range is 0-624 Ln
Black Level Disabled
Setup Disabled
Setup Starting Line Disabled
VBI Lines 6 7 8 9 22 and 23
Enabled
Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Delay Fine Phase Disabled
Sync Fine Phase Enabled
XCR Block (ENS6800+ only) Remove XCR Enable XCR Filter Disabled
Insert XCR Enable XCR Filter Enabled
VBI Field Field 1 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 1
Field 2 VBI Filter (All Lines) Affects Field 2
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 19
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
Changing Parameter SettingsFollow these steps to change the ENCENS6800+ parameter settings1 Rotate the mode select rotary switch (hex switch) to ldquo0rdquo2 Once the hex switch is set to ldquo0rdquo toggle the navigation switch up or
down to select a bank View the two control LEDs next to the navigation toggle switch to see which bank is currently selectedSee Table 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo to view the various banks hex switch positions and corresponding parameter options and values
3 Rotate the hex switch to the parameter number (1 to 9) or letter (A to F) of the option you want to set
4 Toggle the navigation switch to select and set the value of the chosen parameter
5 Rotate the hex switch to another parameter numberletter in the current bank and then repeat step 4orRotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo again to select a different bank and then repeat steps 3 and 4
Table 3-2 Selected Bank as Indicated by Control LEDs
LED D2 LED D1 Bank NumberOff Off 0
Off On 1
On Off 2
On On 3
NoteFor best results use the available 6800+ software control options (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in viewing setting and confirming parameter values
20 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
Recalling Default Parameter SettingsTable 3-2 ldquoParameter Optionsrdquo describes all of the parameter settings for the ENCENS6800+ including the original factory defaults To return this module to its default settings you can either reset each parameter individually or do a global recall following this procedure1 Rotate the hex switch to ldquo0rdquo2 Toggle the navigation switch to the bank number ldquo0rdquo
Use the control LEDs to verify which bank you have selected or use an available 6800+ software control option (seriallocal or Ethernetremote) to aid in confirming your bank selection
3 Rotate the hex switch to the global recall parameter ldquoFrdquo4 Toggle the navigation switch to ldquoOnrdquo
Use an available 6800+ software control option to aid in viewing setting and confirming the parameter value
Reading Software and Hardware VersionsThe current software version of your ENCENS6800+ module can only be viewed using a CCS-enabled control panel or a CCS software application such as Pilot or +Pilot Lite See your RCP-CCS-1U Installation and Operation Manual CCS software application user manual or CCS software application online help for information on viewing software and hardware version numbers
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 21
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
Setting ENCENS6800+ Control ParametersThe following table lists all of the available parameters and options for the ENCENS6800+ All parameters clip unless otherwise indicatedThe OnOff combinations of the control LEDs on the card-edge indicate the active bank number See ldquoChanging Parameter Settingsrdquo on page 20 for more information
LegendBold option=Indicates that this is the default setting for the parameter[RO]=Indicates that parameters are read-onlyfeedback and cannot be used to select controls
All parameters clip unless otherwise noted
NoteThe sequence of options listed in the Options column mirrors the sequence achieved when you move the Navigation Toggle switch up
NoteBank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+ modules only
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
0 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
0 1 SDI Video Standard Selects the video standard input bull 625bull 525bull Auto
0 2 For Future Use
0 3 Black Level Adjusts the picture brightness plusmn75 IRE (0 IRE)
0 4 Luma Gain Adjust the luminous intensity of the video signal
plusmn30 dB(0 dB)
0 5 Chroma Gain Adjusts the picture color saturation plusmn30 dB (0 dB)
22 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
0 6 Chroma Phase Adjust the chroma phase with respect to burst
plusmn180deg(0deg)
0 7 Video Output Standard Set
Sets the video standard for the Composite output
bull NTSC(525 LED isgreen)(525 NTSC)
bull PAL-M(525 LED isorange)
bull PAL-B (625 PAL-B)
0 8 Active Video Setup Controls the addition of the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal signal to the active video lines in 525 line standard for the analog video output
bull Offbull On
0 9 Setup Starting Line Selects the start of the active video line where the SETUP (75 IRE) pedestal is being applied in 525 line standard for the analog video output
10-22 Ln(22 Ln)
0 A For Future Use
0 B Fine Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the output timing in fine increments
plusmn45deg(0deg)
0 C SCH Offset Controls the SCH offset for the composite video output to properly construct the color framing sequence
bull PAL-MB 0deg 90deg 180deg 270deg
bull NTSC 0deg 180deg(0deg)
0 D Reference Input Select Selects the reference input source
This parameter works in conjunction with the J1 LocalFrame jumper setting See ldquoSetting Jumper J1 for Genlock Sourcerdquo on page 13 for more information
bull Genlock 2(625 on overlay)
bull Genlock 1Frame(525 on overlay)
bull Auto
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 23
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
0 E Genlock Mode Selects the Genlock mode bull Free Runbull Mono Lockbull Burstbull Auto
0 F Factory Recall Recalls the factory settings
Note Bank 1 parameter options are available for selection on ENS6800+
1 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
1 1 Vertical Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the vertical timing bull 0 to 524 LnD1-525
bull 0 to 624 LnD1-625(0 ln)
(These parameters wrap)
1 2 Horizontal Phase (ENS6800+ only)
Adjusts the horizontal timing bull 0 to 63518micros D1-525bull 0 to 63963micros D1-625
0 micros(These parameters wrap)
1 3 - 4 For Future Use
1 5 Frame Sync Mode (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the operational mode for the Frame Synchronizer
bull Delay Mode bull Sync Mode
1 6 Freeze Type(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Field 1 bull Field 2bull Frame
1 7 Freeze Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Forces the output video to freeze bull Disabledbull Enabled
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
24 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
1 8 Loss of Video Output (ENS6800+ only)
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
bull Passbull Blackbull Freeze
1 9 Test Signal Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of internal test signal bull Color Barsbull Mod Rampbull MultiBurstbull Pulse amp Bars
1 A Test Signal Enable (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of the internal test signal generator
bull Offbull On
1 B For Future Use
1 C XCR Function Block (ENS6800+ only)
Controls the insertion of the cross-color reduction circuit in the signal processing path (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Removebull Insert
1 D XCR Function Enable(ENS6800+ only)
Controls the activation of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Disabledbull Enabled
1 E XCR Filter Select(ENS6800+ only)
Selects the type of cross-color reduction (not applicable to PAL-B)
bull Filter 1bull Filter 2bull Filter 3
1 F For future Use
Table 3-4 Card Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-525)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 25
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
2 2 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 5 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
26 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
2 C Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 D Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E-F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1-F For Future Use
Table 3-5 Card-Edge Parameter OptionsmdashGroups 2 and 3 (D1-625)
2 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
2 1 Field Select Selects a field for parameters in groups 2 and 3
bull Field 1bull Field 2
2 2 Line 6 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 3 Line 7 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 4 Line 8 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 27
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
2 5 Line 9 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 6 Line 10 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 7 Line 11 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 8 Line 12 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 9 Line 13 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 A Line 14 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 B Line 15 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 C Line 16 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma Oonlybull Blank
2 D Line 17 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
2 E Line 18 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
28 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
2 F For Future Use
3 0 Bank Select Selects a bank bull Bank 0 bull Bank 1bull Bank 2bull Bank 3(These parameters wrap)
3 1 Line 19 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 2 Line 20 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 3 Line 21 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 4 Line 22 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
3 5 Line 23 VBI Selects the processing mode for this VBI line
bull Passbull Luma onlybull Blank
For Future Use
Table 3-3 Card-Edge Parameter Optionsmdash ENCENS6800+ Modules(Continued)
Bank Rotary Switch
Parameter Name Function Parameter Option
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 29
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
LEDs and Alarms
Monitoring LEDsThe ENC6800+ has five monitoring LEDs and ENS6800+ has seven monitoring LEDs that serve as a quick monitoring reference Figure 3-1 shows the general location of the monitoring LEDs on a generic 6800+ module Table 3-6 describes each LED in more detail
Figure 3-1 Location of ENCENS6800+ LEDs
30 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs
LED Color Indications Meaning525 Off Selected input standard is
not D1-525
Flashing Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is not detected
Green Selected input standard is NTSC valid D1-525 video is present
Flashing Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is not detected
Orange Selected output standard is PAL-M valid D1-525 video is present
Auto Off Auto detection of the SDI input standard is not active
Green Auto detection of the SDI input standard is active
625 Off Selected input standard is not D1-625
Flashing Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is not present
Green Selected output standard is PAL-B valid D1-625 video is present
EDH Off EDH is not present
Green EDH is present
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 31
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
Module Status LEDsThe ENCENS6800+ modules do not have any card-edge alarms Instead module status LEDs on the corner of the module light up if an error is detected See Figure 3-1 for the location of these LEDs and Table 3-7 for a definition of the LED colors
Genlock Off Either the Genlock Mode parameter is set to Free Run or the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Delay Mode
Flashing Green Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock Mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Green The modulersquos output is locked to reference video
Freeze (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos output is not frozen
Green The modulersquos output is frozen
TSG (ENS6800+ only)
Off The modulersquos test signal generator is not active
Green The modulersquos test signal generator is active
Table 3-6 Monitoring LEDs (Continued)
LED Color Indications Meaning
32 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
Alarms are usually logged and monitored within available software control applications (for example +Pilot Lite or Pilot) See the appropriate software control user manual or online help for more information
AlarmsTable 3-8 describes the specific alarms for the ENCENS6800+ You can only identify specific alarms using a software control application
NoteIf the LED is flashing red please contact your customer service representative
Table 3-7 Module Status LED Descriptions
LED Color Sequence MeaningOff There is no power to the module the module
is not operational
Green There is power to the module the module is operating properly
Red There is an alarm condition
Flashing red The module has detected a hardwarefirmware fault
Amber The module is undergoing configuration
Table 3-8 Alarm Definitions
Alarm Name Alarm Description Alarm Level
Loss of SDI Indicates SDI video input is missing Major
Loss of Reference_Locked
Indicates that Frame Sync Mode is set to Sync Mode and Genlock mode is not set to Free Run but the modulersquos output is not locked to reference video
Major
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 33
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 3 Operation
34 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 4
Specifications
OverviewThe following specification tables appear in this chapterbull ldquoVideo Inputrdquo on page 36bull ldquoVideo Outputrdquo on page 37bull ldquoPower Consumptionrdquo on page 38Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 35
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Input
Serial Digital Video
Reference Input
Table 4-1 Serial Digital Video Input
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
CMR voltage 30 V p-p up to 60 Hz
Equalization Automatic up to gt23 dB 259M-C (typical)
Table 4-2 Reference Video Input
Item SpecificationsLevel 1 V pk-to-pk
Signal type Analog composite NTSCPAL-B
Connector BNC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB (typical) to 6 MHz
36 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 4 Specifications
Video Output
Composite AnalogTable 4-3 Composite Analog Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandards NTSC PAL-B PAL-M
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt40 dB to 575 MHz
Quantizing 12 bits
Frequency response plusmn015 dB to 55 MHz
Differential gain lt1 (typically lt05)
Differential phase lt1deg (typically lt05deg)
DC offset plusmn50 mV
Chromaluma delay lt15 ns
Chromaluma gain plusmn15
Transient response lt05 K factor
Line time distribution 01
Signal to noise gt60 dB rms with bandwidth 10 kHz to full
Adjustable vertical blanking
bull 10 to 21 lines for NTSC for both fields (Field 2 272 to 283)
bull 6 to 23 lines for PAL for both fields (Field 2 318 to 335)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 37
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 4 Specifications
Serial Digital Video
Data IO Output
Power Consumption
Table 4-4 Serial Digital Video Output
Item SpecificationsStandard SMPTE 259M-C 270 Mbps 525625 component
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss gt18 dB to clock frequency
Signal level 800 mV plusmn10
DC offset 0 V plusmn05 V
Rise and fall times 075 ns to 15 ns
Table 4-5 Data IO Output
Item SpecificationOutput ports 1
Connector BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Table 4-6 Power Consumption
Module Power ConsumptionENC6800+ 67 W
ENS6800+ 75 W
38 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 4 Specifications
Operating TemperatureThe operating temperature for ENCENS6800+ modules is 41deg to 113degF (5deg to 45degC)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 39
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Chapter 4 Specifications
40 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix A
Filters
Composite Encoder Filter
NTSCPAL-M Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is very important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceThese filters are designed to the original RS-170A ldquoIrdquo specificationsFilter specificationsbull lt2 dB down at 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 3 MHz
Figure A-1 NTSCPAL-M Studio CrCb Filter
-30-25-20-15-10
-50
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 41
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix A Filters
PAL-B Pass FilterLuminance
This filter is an ldquoall passrdquo filter No digital filtering is done on the composite encoder It is up to the user to supply a suitable signal that corresponds to the userrsquos encoder application This is important when the signal is being fed to a bandwidth-limited channel
ChrominanceFilter specifications (same as Tx filter)bull lt3 dB down before 13 MHzbull gt20 dB down after 4 MHz
Figure A-2 PAL-B Studio CrCb Filter
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
0 05 1 15 2 25 3Fre q (M Hz)
Le ve l (dB)
42 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix A Filters
Cross-Color Reduction Filter This section describes the cross-color reduction filters that are available for the ENS-6804 board The filter responses and characteristics are limited to the structure of the custom FIR filter ASIC These are 12-bit coefficients with 15-tap folded FIR
Filter SummaryThe implementation of each Cross-Color Reduction filter consists of two filters a vertical high pass filter and a horizontal high pass filter The frequency response of the vertical HPF is fixed and is non-programmable while the horizontal HPF is programmable Table A-1 summarizes the selectable horizontal high pass filters The values are the approximate bandwidths for the application Examine the filter plots for greater detail
Table A-1 Bandwidth of Cross-Color Reduction Filters
Horizontal Pass Filters Cutoff FrequencyFilter 1 60 MHz
Filter 2 58 MHz
Filter 3 50 MHz
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 43
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix A Filters
Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Figure A-3 XCR Vertical High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Horizontal High Pass FiltersFilter 1
Figure A-4 XCR Filter 1 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
44 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix A Filters
Filter 2
Figure A-5 XCR Filter 2 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
Filter 3
Figure A-6 XCR Filter 3 High Pass Filter Frequency Response
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 45
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix A Filters
46 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 47
Appendix B
ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
OverviewThe following checklists will help you solve some of the most commonly seen issuesIt is split into the following two sections bull ldquoGenlock Issuesrdquo on page 48bull ldquoOutput Issuesrdquo on page 51For best results use + Pilot Lite software to check settings and parameters if housed inside an FR6802+ frame + Pilot Lite software is installed on a PC that connects to the 6800+ frame via the serial port connector at the rear of the frame and can be downloaded from wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch Use a null modem RS-232 cable to connect between the PC and the 6800+ frame
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
48 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Genlock Issues If the ENCENS6800+ cannot lock to genlock proceed through the following checklist1 Check that the Reference Input Select parameter is properly set
There are three choicesbull Genlock 1Frame Genlock - When this setting is chosen the
genlock source must come from either the Genlock 1 input (labelled 525) of the back module or from the FR6802+ frame genlock input This is determined by the position of jumper J1 on the ENCENS6800+ moduleSet to pins 1 and 2 for Genlock 1 input and pins 2 and 3 for FRAME input as shown below
Figure B-1 Genlock Mode Jumper Locations and Settings
bull Genlock 2 - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will be taken from the Genlock 2 input (labelled 625) of the back module and is independent of the jumperlsquo setting
bull Auto - If this setting is chosen the genlock source will vary between Genlock 1Frame and Genlock 2 genlock Use this setting if the card is expected to auto-switch between an NTSC or PAL-M reference and a PAL-B reference based on the video input In this case an NTSC reference would be applied one Genlock input and a PAL-B reference applied to the other Then when the input signal changes between NTSC and PAL-B the genlock will automatically switch to the appropriate genlock
NoteAlthough the ENC6800+ does not have a frame synchronizer it still uses the Genlock input for correct color framing on the composite outputs The ENC6800+ cannot be upgraded to an ENS6800+ in the field
NoteThe back module has Genlock 1 labeled 525 and Genlock 2 labeled 625 Despite this inaccurate labeling Genlock 1 can accept an NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B reference and is not limited to NTSC only as the labeling implies The same is true for the Genlock 2 input
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 49
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
source Remember that the jumper determines whether Genlock 1 or the Frame is the source of the second genlock input (see Figure B-1 on page 48)
When the genlock input is valid the D7 Genlock LED on the card edge will turn green
2 (ENS6800+ only) Check that the Frame Sync Mode parameter is set to Sync mode If this parameter is set to Delay it will not synchronize the video to the genlock reference
3 Check that the Genlock Mode parameter is not set to Free Run mode If this parameter is set to Free Run the video will not synchronize to the genlock reference
4 Check that the SDI Video Standard parameter is set to the correct standard for the current video input This parameter is normally left in Auto mode where it will automatically switch between 525 and 625 SDI video standards as the input changes However if this is forced into 525 or 625 then the genlock input must match the chosen standard For example if 625 mode is selected but an NTSC reference is present on the genlock input the unit will not genlock or synchronize
5 If the first four items are correct on your module the next thing to check is the back module Follow these steps a Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back module
NoteThe same type of genlock format (NTSC PAL-M or PAL-B) should never be applied to both genlock input sources at the same time
NoteBent pins may also cause communications issues with Pilot Lite Pilot or Navigator
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
50 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
c Check that the 20 pin spring connector at the bottom of the back module does not have any bent or pressed in pins (See Figure B-2) Even a slightly depressed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
Figure B-2 Back Module to Front Module Connector
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positionsIf this is not possible then the back module can be exchanged for a new one Use part number ENCENS6800+DR
6 If the ENCENS6800+ can still not be genlocked attempt doing a Factory Recall on the module
20-pin connector
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 51
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Output IssuesIf the SDI output has issues such as no output unstable output or frozen output proceed with the following checklist1 Check that the Video Output Standard Set parameter is set
correctly If a 525 SDI input is present then the valid output standard choices are NTSC or PAL-M If PAL-B is chosen but NTSC is desired the module will not pass good video
2 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be frozen check that the Freeze Enable parameter is not set to Enable When this parameter is set to Enable the ENS6800+ will freeze the last video frame or field that was received
3 (ENS6800+ only) - If the video output appears to be stuck on a test pattern check that the Test Signal Enable parameter is not enabled
4 If Closed Captioning on Line 21 does not appear to be picked up by CC decoders or is intermittent ensure that the Line 21 VBI parameters are set to Luma only This bypasses any cross color artifacts that may occura First go to the Field Select parameter and select Field 1b Go to the Line 21 VBI parameter and select Luma onlyc If there is Closed Caption 2 (CC 2) on Field 2 then go back to
the Field Select parameter and choose Field 2 and repeat step bIf the CC decoder still has problems decoding the closed captioning check that there is no setup on Line 21 Go to the Setup Starting Line parameter and set it to 22 so that setup is not added to Line 21
5 If the output is still not valid try doing a Factory Recall6 Check the Module Status LED on the card edge If it is flashing red
there is a likely hardware or firmware fault Contact Customer Service
If after going through this checklist the ENC6800+ or ENS6800+ module still does not operate as expected contact customer service for further assistance Send an email to serviceleitchcom
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
52 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B ENCENS6800+ Troubleshooting
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix C
Communication and ControlTroubleshooting Tips
OverviewFind the following troubleshooting information in this appendixbull ldquoGeneral Troubleshooting Stepsrdquo on page 54bull ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 55bull ldquoHardware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on page 59bull ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 53
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
General Troubleshooting StepsFollow these steps in troubleshooting 6800+ product problems1 Review the ldquoSoftware Communication and Control Issuesrdquo on
page 55 outlined in this chapter2 Search this product manual and other associated documentation for
answers to your questionProduct documentation (including manuals online help application notes erratas product release notes and more) can be found on our Web site at wwwbroadcastharriscomleitch (Support section) along with technical support information training information product downloads and the product knowledge base
3 Contact your customer service representative if after following these initial steps you cannot resolve the issueTo contact customer service see ldquoContacting Customer Servicerdquo on page 59
NoteAssociated documentation for 6800+ series products can generally be found in the product-specific manual that accompanies every module in the FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual and in the 6800+ Safety Instructions and Standards Manual
54 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Software Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed Modulesrdquo on
page 55bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in Framerdquo on page 56bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Respondingrdquo on
page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing
in the Control Windowrdquo on page 57bull ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57bull ldquoCCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not
Communicate with Modulerdquo on page 58bull ldquoAlarm Query Fails When a Device Rebootsrdquo on page 58
+ Pilot Lite Fails to Communicate with Installed ModulesConfirm that the following items are not the reason for the communication failurebull Proper module slot has not been specified (+ Pilot Lite is not
communicating with the appropriate slot) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on slot identification
bull COM port is used elsewhere (Check that the correct COM port is configured in + Pilot Lite and that another application is not using that COM port)
bull Actual frame ID does not match with the two DIP switch settings in the back of the frame (+ Pilot Lite is not communicating with the proper frame) See your FR6802+ Frame Installation and Operation Manual for more information on frame ID switch settings
bull A null modem cable is not being used Between the PC running + Pilot Lite and the FR6802+ frame there should be a null RS-232 modem cable At minimum this requires that pins 2 and 3 are crossed and 5 to 5 for ground
bull ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame (+ Pilot Lite control is disabled if an ICE6800+ module is installed in the frame ICE6800+ modules are used for CCS control)
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 55
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
bull A legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products They will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls The module must be from the 6800+ product family
bull Check that the back module does not have any bent pinsFollow this procedurea Unplug the front moduleb Unscrew and remove the back modulec View the 20-pin spring connector at the bottom of the back
module See Figure C-1
Figure C-1 Back Module to Front Module Connector
This connector should not have any bent or pressed pins Even a slightly depresssed or bent pin may cause genlock issues
d If there are bent pins carefully re-position them to their correct positions If this is not possible then a back module can be exchanged for a new one
+ Pilot Lite Does Not Find All Modules in FrameIf a discovery is started too soon after frame power-up + Pilot Lite will not find all the installed modules Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) and ensure that installed modules are fully powered-up before discovery
20-pin connector
56 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
If a module is plugged into the frame after a discovery + Pilot Lite does not automatically detect the module Refresh + Pilot Lite (File gt Refresh) to discover the newly installed moduleIf a Legacy 6800 series product is in the frame + Pilot Lite will not detect it + Pilot Lite cannot communicate with legacy 6800 series products Although they can be installed in the FR6802+ frame and work using card edge controls they will not be discovered or controlled by + Pilot Lite For + Pilot Lite to find a module it must be from the 6800+ product family
+ Pilot Lite or CCS Software Application Not Responding+ Pilot Lite and CCS applications such as Navigator or Pilot cannot run on the same PC at the same time Both applications can be installed but only one can be opened at a time
+ Pilot Lite Cannot Control a Module Showing in the Control Window
Consider these questionsbull Did you physically set the jumper for local control If so set this
jumper to the REM position for remote controlbull Is the module properly seated in the frame and in the right slot
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the framebull Does the Control window indicate the device is ldquoreadyrdquo The
device may be powered off or disconnected from the network See ldquo+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquordquo on page 57
+ Pilot Lite Status Bar Reports lsquoNot Readyrsquo+ Pilot Lite reports each devicersquos connection status in the status bar If the connection status message reads ldquoNot Readyrdquo check the followingbull Is the module properly seated in the frame Check the position of
the module in the framebull Is the frame connected to the network Check the devicersquos network
connection For + Pilot Lite an RS-232 null modem cable is required between the PC and the FR6802+ frame
If the status bar still reports no status or ldquoNot Readyrdquo for the frame or device try restarting + Pilot Lite
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 57
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
CCS Software Application or Remote Control Panel Does Not Communicate with Module
CCS software applications (such as Pilot CoPilot and Navigator) and remote control panels require the purchase and installation of an ICE6800+ module in an FR6802+XF frame in order to communicate remotely via Ethernet
Alarm Query Fails When a Device RebootsWhen you reboot a device connected to your PC the alarm traffic and status update messages may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail While the query does not automatically retry it will post an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message to the Diagnostics windowTo clear an ldquoAlarm query failedrdquo message right-click inside the Diagnostics window and then select Refresh from the resulting context menu
58 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
Hardware Communication and Control Issuesbull ldquoFrames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failurerdquo
on page 59bull ldquoModule Does Not Seem to Workrdquo on page 59
Frames Fail to Communicate with the PC after a Power Failure
Have you exited the software and restarted since the frame recovered from its power failure To restore communications between the PC and the frames ensure that the frames have three or more minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and restart the PC
Module Does Not Seem to WorkAlthough the following troubleshooting tips may seem obvious please take the time to ensure the followingbull All appropriate rear connections are securely madebull The board is securely installed (with no bent pins)bull The frame is turned on
Contacting Customer ServiceWe are committed to providing round-the-clock 24-hour service to our customers around the world Visit our Web site atwwwbroadcastharriscomleitch for information on how to contact the customer service team in your geographical region
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 59
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Appendix C Communication and Control Troubleshooting Tips
60 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Index
KeywordsSymbols525 input 48625 input 4868007000 series frames 11
Aactive bank number 22active video setup 23Adjustable vertical blanking 37alarm query 58alarms 30 33 58analog composite 36analog signal 2application not responding 57associated parameters 19audio synchronizers compatible 2audio tracking signal 2auto genlock select 48available parameters 22
Bback connector 6 7 11 50Bank Select 22black 2 3 22BNC connector 36
Ccard edge operation 17CCS application 57changing parameters 20
chroma gain 22chroma phase 23Chromaluma delay 37Chromaluma gain 37chrominance 2 3 41CJ1 jumper 12clip 22Closed Captioning 51CMR voltage 36color bars 3compatibility 57compatible audio synchronizers 2composite analog signal 2Composite Analog video output 37Composite Encoder Filter 41composite outputs 2connections 15Connector 36 38contacting customer service 59control LEDs 5 20control problems 57controls 4CrCb Filter 42cross color artifacts 51cross-color reduction 2
circuit 25filter 43
cross-functional parameter changes 19customer service contacting 59
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 61
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Index
DData IO Output 38DC offset 37 38default parameter settings 21Delay Mode 32description product 2Differential gain 37Differential phase 37digital filtering 42digital internal processing over-sample rate 2discovery failure 56disrupted video 25
EEDH 31EDH detection 2 3Encoder Filter 41encoding 2Equalization 36external genlock 2
FFactory Recall 24 51fail to communicate 59Field Select 51filters 43Fine Phase 19 23FIR filter 43FR6802+ frames 9Frame Genlock 48frame genlock 2 3Frame Sync Mode 19 32 49Free Run 32freeze 3 24Freeze Enable 51Frequency response 37front module 11
GGenlock 48
input 2 3mode 24 32source 13
HH Phase 19hardware version 21horizontal high pass filter 43 44Horizontal Phase 24
IICE6800+ 2Impedance 36 38input level 36input signal loss 3input signal type 36input standard 31installation 9 15installed modules 56internal processing 2internal processing rate 2internal test signal 25IO_delay output 14
JJA jumper 13JB jumper 14jitter 2 3jumper CJ1 12jumper JA 13jumper JB 14jumpers 4 12
62 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Index
LLED locations 4LEDs 30Line 21 51Line time distribution 37local control 12 57local mode 13localRemote control jumper 5lock reference video 32loss of input signal 3Loss of Video Output 25Luma Gain 22Luma only 51luminance 2 3 41
Mmaking connections 15Manual information viindash vii ndashviiimaximum allowable power ratings 10mode select rotary switch 5modulated ramp 3module not found 56module state 5module status LEDs 5 32 51modules removing 15monitoring LEDs 5 30multiburst 3
Nnavigation toggle switch 5 20network connection 57not ready status 57NTSCPAL-M pass filter 41
Ooperating notes 18operating temperature 39operation 17output
ports 38standard 31timing 23video mode 25
outputs 2over-sample rate 2
Ppacking list 11PAL-B Pass Filter 42parameter
changes 19settings 20
pass 3Pass Filter 41pedestal 2 3Pilot Lite 2pin spring connector 50power
consumption 10 38dissipation 10failure 59frame ratings 10
Precautions safety xiiproduct description 2Product servicing ixpulsebars 3
Rreboot device 58recalling default parameter settings 21reclocked outputs 2reclocking SDI 14reference 2 3Reference Input Select 23 48remote control 12 57remote mode 13removing modules 15Return loss 36 38Returning a product ix
ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual 63
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Index
Revision history of the manual viiRise and fall times 38RoHS-compliance xrotary switch 20
SSafety precautions xiiSCH offset 2 3 23SDI outputs 2SDI video standard 19 22serial digital video 36
output 38setup 19
pedestal signal 23starting line 19 23
Shipping and unpacking a product ixShipping information ixsignal flow 8Signal level 36 38Signal to noise 37software version 21Specifications 35Standards
RoHS compliance xvideo 36WEEE compliance xi
status not ready 57Support documents viiisync mode 19
Ttemperature 39test signal 3
select 25Test Signal Enable 51Trademarks and copyrights ii
Transient response 37troubleshooting 47ndash59Tx filter 42types of modules 15
UUnpacking and shipping a product ixUnpacking information ixunpacking modules 11usable slots 10
VV Phase 19VBI lines 19vertical blanking 3
control 2vertical high pass filter frequency response 44video input 36video output 37
standard set 23Video Output Standard Set 51video reference lock 32video standard 36
WWarranty information iiWEEE compliance xiWriting conventions viii
XXCR Block 19XCR filter 25 45XCR function 25
64 ENCENS6800+ Installation and Operation Manual
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way | Mason OH USA 45040 | Tel 1 (513) 459 3400
wwwbroadcastharriscom
Copyright copy 2006 Harris Corporation
Harris and Leitch are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation Trademarks and tradenames are the property of their respective companies